Samsung | HW-J7501 | دليل المستخدم | Samsung HW-J7501 دليل المستخدم

HW-J7501
User manual
Curved Soundbar
Imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 1
2015-04-16
3:54:42
GETTING STARTED
GETTING STARTED
FEATURES
Streaming Music Services
USB Host Support
The Curved Soundbar makes diving into all your favourite
music easier than ever before, thanks to its Wi-Fi
capabilities. Simply access the Samsung Multiroom App
to experience the best of the internet’s subscription
streaming music services.
You can connect and play music files from external USB
storage devices such as MP3 players, USB flash
memory, etc. using the Soundbar's USB HOST function.
Surround Sound Expansion
You can connect a Bluetooth device to the Soundbar
and enjoy music with high quality stereo sound, all
without wires!
The Surround Sound Expansion feature adds depth and
spaciousness to your listening experience.
TV SoundConnect
Connect your TV and Soundbar easily through Bluetooth
with TV SoundConnect. The absence of trailing wires
between the Soundbar and TV allows you to showcase
the slim and sleek design of both systems, while
maintaining a clean look in your living environment. Easily
control the Soundbar and TV from a single TV remote.
Bluetooth Function
LICENCES
Manufactured under Licence from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Music Source Sharing (= Multiroom Play)
Controlling and sharing one music source across multiple
audio devices in various locations is made easy with
Multiroom Link. The mobile app remotely controls volume
and music on your system across different devices,
including your TV, Soundbar, Home Entertainment
System and Blu-ray Disc Player. Enjoy the audio you
want, where you want.
HDMI
HDMI transmits video and audio signals simultaneously,
and provides a clearer picture.
The unit is also equipped with the ARC function which
lets you listen to sound from your TV through the
Soundbar via an HDMI cable. This function is only
available if you connect the unit to an ARC compliant TV.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com.
Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing Limited.
DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks, and DTS 2.0 Channel is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
2
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 2
2015-04-16
3:54:45
GETTING STARTED
SAFETY INFORMATION
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
ENG
SAFETY WARNINGS
This symbol indicates “dangerous voltage”
inside the product that presents a risk of electric
shock or personal injury.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
This symbol indicates important instructions
accompanying the product.
WARNING : To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION : TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
• This apparatus shall always be connected to a AC outlet with a protective grounding connection.
• To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the
mains plug shall be readily operable.
CAUTION
• Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing. Do not put objects filled with liquids, such as vases on the
apparatus.
• To turn this apparatus off completely, you must pull the power plug out of the wall socket. Consequently, the power
plug must be easily and readily accessible at all times.
3
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 3
2015-04-16
3:54:45
GETTING STARTED
PRECAUTIONS
68.6 mm
99.1mm
99.1mm
99.1mm
Ensure that the AC power supply in your house complies with the power requirements listed on the identification
sticker located on the back of your product. Install your product horizontally, on a suitable base (furniture), with enough
space around it for ventilation (7~10 cm). Make sure the ventilation slots are not covered. Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or other equipment which may become hot. This unit is designed for continuous use. To fully turn off the
unit, disconnect the AC plug from the wall outlet. Unplug the unit if you intend to leave it unused for a long period of
time.
During thunderstorms
thunderstorms, disconnect the AC plug from the
wall outlet. Voltage peaks due to lightning could damage
the unit.
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight or oth
other heat
sources. This could lead to overheating and cause the
unit to malfunction.
Protect the product from moisture (i.e. vases), and
excess heat (e.g. a fireplace) or equipment creating
strong magnetic or electric fields. Disconnect the power
cable from the AC supply if the unit malfunctions. Your
product is not intended for industrial use. It is for
personal use only. Condensation may occur if your
product has been stored in cold temperatures. If
transporting the unit during the winter, wait approximately
2 hours until the unit has reached room temperature
before using.
The batteries used with this product contain chemicals
that are harmful to the environment. Do not dispose of
batteries in the general household trash. Do not dispose
of batteries in a fire. Do not short circuit, disassemble, or
overheat the batteries. There is a danger of explosion if
the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type.
WARNING, DO NOT INGEST BATTERY, CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD, The remote control supplied with
this product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause
severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. Keep new and used batteries away from
children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
4
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 4
2015-04-16
3:54:45
GETTING STARTED
CONTENTS
ENG
2
GETTING STARTED
24 FUNCTIONS
2
Features
24
Input Mode
3
Safety Information
25
Bluetooth
6
What’s Included
27
Using the Network Standby On
Function
7
DESCRIPTIONS
27
Using the Multiroom Link
7
Top / Front Panel
29
Software Update
8
Rear / Bottom Panel
9
Remote Control
31 TROUBLESHOOTING
31
Troubleshooting
11 INSTALLATION
11
Installing Soundbar
11
Installing both Soundbar and TV to the Wall
Mount Type
14
Installing Soundbar to TV Stand
15
Installing Soundbar to Free-Standing
16
Assembling the Clamp-Wire
16
Mounting the Cover-Foot onto
Subwoofer
32 APPENDIX
32
Specifications
Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are
provided for reference only and may differ from
actual product appearance.
17 CONNECTIONS
17
Connecting the Subwoofer
18
Connecting to a TV
18
Connections with TV Using HDMI (Digital)
Cable
19
Connections with TV Using Optical (Digital)
Cable
20
TV SoundConnect
21
Connections with External Device
21
HDMI Cable
21
Optical or AUX Cable
22
USB
5
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 5
2015-04-16
3:54:46
GETTING STARTED
WHAT’S INCLUDED
BEFORE READING THE USER’S MANUAL
Note the following terms before reading the user manual.
+ Icons used in this manual
Icon
Term
Caution
Note
Definition
Indicates a situation where a function does not operate or settings may be cancelled.
Indicates tips or instructions on the page that help you operate a function.
Check for the supplied accessories shown below.
Main Unit
Remote Control /
Lithium Battery
(3V : CR2032)
Power Cord
DC Adapter
HDMI Cable
USB Cable
USB Converter
Clamp-Wire
User Manual
Holder-Mount
TV-Mount
Holder-Screw 1 :
4EA
Holder-Screw 2 :
10EA
Holder-Fix Mount
Holder-Foot : 3EA
Subwoofer
Power Cord
Cover-Foot : 4EA
Screw-Taptite : 4EA
Foot Rubber : 4EA
● The appearance of the accessories may differ slightly from the illustrations above.
● Use the dedicated USB cable to connect external USB devices to the unit.
6
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 6
2015-04-16
3:54:46
DESCRIPTIONS
DESCRIPTIONS
TOP / FRONT PANEL
Controls the volume level.
The numeric value of the volume level
appears in the front panel display.
(Power) Button
Turns the power on and off.
ENG
VOL. - / +
(Source) Button
Display
Selects the D.IN, AUX, HDMI, BT, TV, or
USB input.
Displays the current mode.
● While the unit is powered on, pressing
(Source) button for more than
the
3 seconds sets the button to act as
(Mute) button. To cancel the
the
(Mute) button setup, press the
(Source) button for more than 3
seconds again.
● To clean this apparatus, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and wipe the product using a soft, dry
cloth. Due to aluminum being a positive electrostatic material, static discharge may occur.
● When you plug in the AC cord, the power key will work in 4 to 6 seconds.
● When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5 second delay before it produces sound.
● If you want to enjoy the sound only from the Soundbar, you must turn off the TV's speakers in the Audio
Setup menu of your TV. Refer to the owner's manual supplied with your TV.
7
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 7
2015-04-16
3:54:50
DESCRIPTIONS
REAR / BOTTOM PANEL
OPTICAL IN (D.IN)
Connect to the digital (optical) output of an external device.
HDMI OUT (TV-ARC)
Outputs digital video and audio signals simultaneously using an
HDMI cable.
HDMI IN
Inputs digital video and audio signals simultaneously using an HDMI
cable. Use when connecting a supported external device.
LAN
Lets you connect to a network using a LAN cable.
AUX IN
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
Connect to the Analogue output of an external device.
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
LABEL
5V 0.5A
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
Press this button to
connect your Soundbar to
your network using Wi-Fi
setup.
SPK ADD
Press the button to
connect Soundbar to
the HUB.
(not supplied)
DC 24V
(Power Supply In)
Connect the DC power
adaptor to the power
supply jack, and then
connect the AC power
adaptor plug to a wall
outlet.
(USB Port)
Connect USB devices here
to play files on the devices.
● When disconnecting the power cable of the AC power adaptor from a wall outlet, pull the plug.
Do not pull the cable.
● Do not connect this unit or other components to an AC outlet until all connections between components
are complete.
8
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 8
2015-04-16
3:54:53
DESCRIPTIONS
REMOTE CONTROL
ENG
SOURCE
Press to select a source connected to the Soundbar.
Mute
You can turn the volume down to 0 with the push of a button.
Press again to restore the sound to the previous volume level.
Repeat
Press to set the Repeat function during music playback from a USB device.
OFF - REPEAT : Cancells Repeat Playback.
TRACK - REPEAT : Repeatedly play a track.
ALL - REPEAT : Repeatedly play all tracks.
RANDOM - REPEAT : Plays tracks in random order.
(A track that has already been played may be played again.)
Skip Forward
If there is more than one file on the device you are playing, and you press
the $ button, the next file is selected.
SOUND CONTROL (*Use the #,$ buttons to adjust level.)
Press to select TREBLE, BASS, or AUDIO SYNC. Then, use the #,$
buttons to adjust the Treble, Bass volume from -3 to +3.
Press and hold the SOUND CONTROL button for about 5 seconds to adjust
the sound for each frequency band. 150Hz, 300Hz, 600Hz, 1.2KHz, 2.5KHz,
5KHz, and 10KHz are selectable and each can be adjusted to a setting between
-6 and +6.
If the Soundbar is connected to a digital TV and the video appears out of sync
with the audio, press the SOUND CONTROL button to sync the audio with the
video. Use the #,$ buttons to set the audio delay between
0 ms and 300 ms. In USB mode, TV mode, and BT mode, the Audio Sync
function may not available.
Anynet+
Press the Anynet+ button to turn the Anynet+ function on or off.
(Default : Auto Power Link OFF, ON - ANYNET+ / OFF - POWER LINK or OFF
- ANYNET+ / ON - POWER LINK). The Anynet+ function lets you control the
Soundbar with the remote from an Anynet+ compatible Samsung TV. The
Soundbar must be connected to the TV via an HDMI cable.
* Auto Power Link
Synchronizes the Soundbar to a connected Optical source via the Optical
jack so it turns on automatically when you turn on your TV. (See page 19)
You can also activate Wi-Fi SETUP function by pressing and holding Anynet+
button on the remote for over 7 seconds.
● Soundbar is a Samsung proprietary name.
● Operate the TV using the TV's remote control.
9
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 9
2015-04-16
3:54:54
DESCRIPTIONS
Power
Turns the Soundbar on and off.
Volume
Adjusts the volume level of the unit.
Play / Pause
Press the & button to pause the playing of a file temporarily.
Press the & button again to play the selected file.
Skip Back
If there is more than one file on the device you are playing, and you press the #
button, the previous file is selected.
SOUND EFFECT
You can select the sound modes - STANDARD (Original Sound), MUSIC,
CLEAR VOICE, SPORTS, MOVIE, and NIGHT MODE - depending on the
content you want to listen to.
Select the STANDARD mode if you want to enjoy the original sound.
SOUND
Surr.Sound adds depth and spaciousness to the sound. Pressing the
SOUND button repeatedly cycles through the Surr.Sound settings :
ON - SURROUND SOUND, OFF - SURROUND SOUND
STREAMING MUSIC
Press STREAMING MUSIC button to listen to an Internet radio station. Each
time you press this button, the Soundbar switches to the next default station,
cycling through the 3 default stations.
To use the STREAMING MUSIC function, the soundbar must be connected to
the network. (See page 27)
DRC (Dynamic Range Control) *
Lets you apply dynamic range control to Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, and
Dolby TrueHD audio.
Press and hold the STREAMING MUSIC button, then the DRC (Dynamic
Range Control) function toggles between ON and OFF.
WOOFER (* Use the #,$ buttons to adjust woofer volume.)
Press the WOOFER button. Then, use the #,$ buttons to adjust Subwoofer
volume from -12, -6 to +6.
You can also activate SPK ADD function of the soundbar by pressing and
holding WOOFER button of the remote for over 5 seconds.
INSTALLING THE BATTERY IN THE REMOTE CONTROL
1. Use a suitable coin to turn the
remote control's battery cover
counterclockwise to remove it
as shown in the figure above.
2. Insert a 3V lithium battery. Keep the
positive (+) pole facing up when inserting
the battery. Put the battery cover on and
align the '●' marks side by side as
shown in the figure above.
3. Use a suitable coin to
turn the remote control
battery cover clockwise
as far as it will go to fix it
in place.
10
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 10
2015-04-16
3:54:55
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
INSTALLING SOUNDBAR
ENG
INSTALLING BOTH SOUNDBAR AND TV TO THE WALL
MOUNT TYPE
● This model corresponds to the 2015 Samsung curved TV S8500/S9000 - 55"/65", S9500 - 65". Please
refer to the home page of Samsung Electronics to see the detail list of corresponding models.
● When mounting the Soundbar to a JS9500 series TV, use the 1.6” Cover-Distance which is included
in the Samsung Mini Wall Mount set.
● To mount both of a soundbar and the TV using the wall mount, make sure to mount the soundbar onto the
TV first, then mount the TV.
● To mount the TV on the wall, refer to the user’s manual enclosed with the TV you purchased.
● This Soundbar cannot be installed to a non-compatible TV, in either form of TV mount or TV stand.
Check for the supplied accessories shown below.
Used for S9500,
65” TV model
Holder-Screw 1 : 4EA Holder-Screw 2 : 10EA
TV-Mount
Holder-Fix Mount
Holder-Mount
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
1. Place the Soundbar as shown in the illustration, ensuring that none of the buttons touch the surface it is lying on.
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
5V 0.5A
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
2. Remove Holder-Support (2EA) from the Soundbar as shown in the illustration.
11
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 11
2015-04-16
3:54:56
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
INSTALLATION
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
5V 0.5A
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
3. Fasten the four Holder-Screws 1 and four of the Holder-Screws 2 to the four holes in the Soundbar, as shown
in the illustration.
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
4.
If the Holder-Foot is attached, remove it first to install the TV-Mount.
TV
65” S9500 TV
5. (When mounting to a S9500, 65” TV model. For other models, skip this step.)
Seat the Holder-Mount onto the TV using the TV’s guide, fix it by fastening Holder-Screw 2 (4EA).
Carefully align the Holder-Mount’s hole centred on the TV, not to place it one-sided.
12
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 12
2015-04-16
3:54:58
INSTALLATION
ENG
65” S9500 TV
6. If you mount the Soundbar on a matched Samsung TV, use the Guide on TV to put the TV-Mount on TV securely.
7. Fasten the TV-Mount to the TV using the remaining 4 Holder-Screws 2.
8. After attaching the TV-Mount, mount the TV on the wall.
Soundbar base
TV base, with TV-Mount attached
9. Push the Soundbar onto the TV-Mount as far as it will go, as shown in the illustration.
10. Fasten the Holder-Fix Mount to the Soundbar to fix the Soundbar to the TV-Mount.
13
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 13
2015-04-16
3:55:01
INSTALLATION
INSTALLING SOUNDBAR TO TV STAND
You can install Soundbar to TV stand if you have Soundbar matching TV with this model.
Check for the supplied accessories shown below.
Holder-Foot : 3EA
Holder-Screw 2 : 3EA
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
2
Wi Fi SETUP
SP
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
1
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
1. Place the Soundbar as shown in the illustration, ensuring that none of the buttons touch the surface it is lying on.
2. Fix Holder-Foot (3EA) and Holder-Screw 2 (3EA) to the Soundbar as shown in the illustration.
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
5V 0.5A
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
3. Remove Holder-Support (2EA) from the Soundbar as shown in the illustration.
14
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 14
2015-04-16
3:55:03
INSTALLATION
ENG
4. Align the Soundbar’s centre with the centre of the base of the TV, and then carefully push it onto the stand as far
as it will go, as shown in the illustration. Be careful not to unbalance the TV.
● Do not place a heavy thing or step on the main unit.
INSTALLING SOUNDBAR TO FREE-STANDING
1. Centre the Soundbar on the flat area in front of the TV.
15
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 15
2015-04-16
3:55:05
INSTALLATION
HDMI IN
LAN
Clamp-Wire
AUX IN
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
(TV-ARC)
HDMI OUT
(TV-ARC)
OPTICAL IN
OPTICAL IN
ASSEMBLING THE CLAMP-WIRE
Attach the clamp-wire to the unit as shown, and then run the cables through the clamp-wire to keep them neat.
MOUNTING THE COVER-FOOT ONTO
SUBWOOFER
PO
WE
R
1
2
3
1. Place each Cover-Foot on the 4 holes correspondingly as shown in the illustration.
2. Insert Screw-Taptite (4EA) into corresponding hole of Cover-Foot.
3. Block up the holes with Foot Rubber (4EA) to complete.
16
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 16
2015-04-16
3:55:05
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS
ENG
● Do not connect the power cord of this product or your TV to a wall outlet until all connections between
components are complete.
● Before moving or installing this product, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power cord.
CONNECTING THE SUBWOOFER
CONNECTING TO THE SUBWOOFER AUTOMATICALLY
The main unit and subwoofer should link (connect wirelessly) automatically when the main unit and subwoofer are
turned on.
• If it is completely connected, the blue LED in the subwoofer stops blinking.
CONNECTING TO THE SUBWOOFER MANUALLY
The Subwoofer's linking ID is preset at the factory and the main unit and subwoofer should link (connect wirelessly)
automatically when the main unit and subwoofer are turned on. If the Link indicator does not light when the main unit
and subwoofer are turned on, please set the ID by following the procedure below.
POWER
1. Plug the power cords of the main unit and subwoofer into an AC wall outlet.
2. Press the ID SET button on the back of the subwoofer with a small, pointed object for 5 seconds.
• The STANDBY indicator is turned off and the LINK indicator (Blue LED) blinks quickly.
3. While the main unit is powered off (in STANDBY mode), press and hold the
seconds.
(Mute) on the remote control for 5
4. The ID SET message appears on the Soundbar's display.
5. To finalise the link, turn the main unit’s power on while the subwoofer’s Blue LED blinks.
• The main unit and the subwoofer should now be linked (connected).
• The Link indicator (Blue LED) on the subwoofer should be on.
• If the Link indicator is not solid blue, the linking process has failed. Turn off the main unit and start again from
Step 2.
• You can enjoy better sound from the wireless subwoofer by selecting a Sound Effect.
(See page 10)
17
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 17
2015-04-16
3:55:06
CONNECTIONS
● Before moving or installing the product, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power cord.
● If the main unit is powered off, the wireless subwoofer will be in standby mode and the STANDBY LED on
the upper side will come on after the Link indicator (Blue LED) blinks for 30 seconds.
● If you use a device that uses the same frequency (2.4GHz) as the Soundbar near the Soundbar,
interference may cause some sound interruption.
● The transmission distance of the wireless signal between the main unit and subwoofer is about 10 meters,
but may vary depending on your operating environment. If a steel-concrete or metallic wall is between the
main unit and the wireless subwoofer, the system may not operate at all, because the wireless signal
cannot penetrate metal.
● If the main unit doesn't make a wireless connection, follow steps 1-5 on the previous page to re-set the
connection between the main unit and wireless subwoofer.
● The wireless receiving antenna is built into the wireless subwoofer. Keep the unit away from water and
moisture.
● For optimal listening performance, make sure that the area around the wireless subwoofer location is clear
of any obstructions.
CONNECTING TO A TV
CONNECTIONS WITH TV USING HDMI (DIGITAL) CABLE
HDMI Cable
HDMI IN
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
HDMI OUT
(TV-ARC)
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
1. Connect an HDMI cable from the HDMI OUT (TV-ARC) jack on the back of the product to the HDMI IN jack on
your TV.
(Source) button on the top panel of Soundbar or the SOURCE button on remote control to select
2. Press the
the D.IN mode.
● HDMI is an interface that enables the digital transmission of video and audio data with just a single
connector.
● If the TV provides an ARC port, connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN (ARC) port.
● We recommend you use a coreless HDMI cable if possible. If you use a cored HDMI cable, use one whose
diameter is less than 14 mm.
● Anynet+ must be turned on.
● This function is not available if the HDMI cable does not support ARC.
18
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 18
2015-04-16
3:55:07
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS WITH TV USING OPTICAL (DIGITAL) CABLE
ENG
Optical Cable
(not supplied)
OPTICAL OUT
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
OPTICAL IN
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
1. Connect OPTICAL IN (Audio) on the Soundbar to the OPTICAL OUT jack of the TV.
2. Press the
(Source) button on the top panel of Soundbar or the SOURCE button on remote control to select
the D.IN mode.
+ Auto Power Link
If you have connected the main unit to a TV with a digital optical cable, set the Auto Power function ON to have
the Soundbar turn on automatically when you turn the TV on.
AUTO POWER LINK
Display
ON
OFF - ANYNET+ / ON - POWER LINK
OFF
ON - ANYNET+ / OFF - POWER LINK
1. Connect the Soundbar and a TV with an Optical cable. (not supplied)
2. Press the
(Source) button on the main unit’s top panel or the SOURCE button on the remote control to
select the D.IN mode.
3. Press the Anynet+ button on the remote control to toggle the Auto Power Link function on and off.
● Depending on the connected device, Auto Power Link may not function.
19
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 19
2015-04-16
3:55:08
CONNECTIONS
TV SOUNDCONNECT
You can enjoy TV sound through your Soundbar when it is connected to a Samsung TV that supports the TV
SoundConnect function.
Connect
1. Turn on the TV and Soundbar.
• Turn on the menu of the TV.
• Move to Speaker Settings on "Sound" tab.
• Set the "Add New Device" menu to "On".
(Source) button on the main unit’s top panel or the SOURCE button on the remote control to
2. Press the
select the TV mode.
3. On the TV, a message asking whether to enable the TV SoundConnect function appears.
4. Select <Yes> to finish connecting the TV and Soundbar using the TV's remote control.
● Switching the Soundbar’s mode from TV to another mode automatically terminates TV SoundConnect.
● To connect the Soundbar to another TV, the existing connection must be terminated.
● Terminate the connection to the existing TV, and then press the & button on the remote control for 5
seconds to connect to another TV.
● The TV SoundConnect (SoundShare) function is supported by some Samsung TVs released from 2012 on.
Check whether your TV supports the TV SoundConnect (SoundShare) function before you begin. (For
further information, refer to the TV’s user manual.).
● If your Samsung TV was released before 2014, check the SoundShare setting menu.
● If the distance between the TV and Soundbar exceeds 10 meters, the connection may not be stable or the
audio may stutter. If this occurs, relocate the TV or Soundbar so that they are within operational range, and
then re-establish the TV SoundConnect connection.
● TV SoundConnect Operational Ranges:
- Recommended pairing range: within 2 meters.
- Recommended operational range: within 10 meters.
● The Play/Pause, Next, and Prev buttons on the Soundbar or Soundbar's remote do not control the TV.
20
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 20
2015-04-16
3:55:10
CONNECTIONS
ENG
CONNECTIONS WITH EXTERNAL
DEVICE
HDMI CABLE
HDMI is the standard digital interface for connecting to TVs, projectors, DVD players, Blu-ray players, set top boxes,
and more.
HDMI prevents any degradation to the signal due to conversion to analogue and maintains the video and audio
quality of the original digital source.
HDMI Cable
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
Digital Devices
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
1. Connect an HDMI cable from the HDMI IN jack on the back of the product to the HDMI OUT jack on your digital
device.
(Source) button on the top panel of Soundbar or the SOURCE button on remote control to select
2. Press the
the HDMI mode.
OPTICAL OR AUX CABLE
This unit comes equipped with one optical in digital jack and one audio analogue in jack, giving you two ways to
connect it to an External Devices.
Audio Cable
(not supplied)
AUX OUT
OPTICAL IN
OPTICAL OUT
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
BD / DVD player /
Set-top box /
Game console
AUX IN
Optical Cable
(not supplied)
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
21
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 21
2015-04-16
3:55:10
CONNECTIONS
+ AUX Cable
1. Connect AUX IN (Audio) on the main unit to the AUDIO OUT jack of the Source Device.
2. Press the
(Source) button on the top panel of Soundbar or the SOURCE button on remote control to select
the AUX mode.
+ Optical Cable
1. Connect OPTICAL IN (Audio) on the main unit to the OPTICAL OUT jack of the Source Device.
2. Press the
(Source) button on the top panel of Soundbar or the SOURCE button on remote control to select
the D.IN mode.
USB
You can play music files located on USB storage devices through the Soundbar.
Display
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
USB port
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
5V 0.5A
1. Connect the USB device to the USB port on the back of the product.
2. Press the
(Source) button on the main unit’s top panel or the SOURCE button on the remote control to
select the USB mode.
3. USB appears on the display screen.
•
The Soundbar connection to the USB device is complete.
•
The Soundbar automatically turns off (Auto Power Off) if no USB device has been connected for more than 15
minutes.
+ Before you connect a USB device
Be aware of the following:
● If the file name of a file on a USB device exceeds 10 characters, it is not displayed on the Soundbar's display.
● This product may not be compatible with certain types of USB storage media.
● The Soundbar supports the FAT16 and FAT32 file systems.
-
The NTFS file system is not supported.
● Connect USB devices directly to the USB port of the product. Otherwise, you may encounter a USB compatibility
problem.
22
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 22
2015-04-16
3:55:12
CONNECTIONS
● Do not connect multiple storage devices to the product via a multi-card reader. It may not operate properly.
● Digital camera PTP protocols are not supported.
ENG
● Do not remove the USB device while it is transferring files.
● DRM-protected music files (MP3, WMA) from commercial web sites cannot be played.
● External HDDs are not supported.
● Mobile phone devices are not supported.
● File Format Type Compatibility list:
Extension
*.mp3
*.wma
Codec
Sampling Rate
Bit rate
MPEG 1 Layer1
32/44.1/48
32 ~ 448kbps
MPEG 1 Layer2
32/44.1/48
32 ~ 384kbps
MPEG 1 Layer3
32/44.1/48
32 ~ 320kbps
MPEG 2 Layer3
16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48
8 ~ 160kbps
MPEG 2.5 Layer3
8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48
8 ~ 160kbps
Wave_Format_MSAudio1
-
-
Wave_Format_MSAudio2
-
-
WMA Professional
Not Support
-
*.wav
-
8 KHz ~ 192KHz
~ 8.8Mbps
*.ogg
-
8 KHz ~ 48KHz
-
*.flac
-
8 KHz ~ 192KHz
~ 5.6Mbps
*.m4a
Alac
(Apple lossless Audo codec)
8 KHz ~ 192KHz
~ 1Mbps
*.aif
Audio Interchange File Format
8 KHz ~ 192KHz
~ 4.4Mbps
● If there are too many folders and files stored in the USB device, reading may take some time.
23
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 23
2015-04-16
3:55:13
FUNCTIONS
FUNCTIONS
INPUT MODE
Press the
(Source) button on the main unit’s top panel or the SOURCE button on the remote control to select
the mode you want.
Input mode
Display
Optical Digital input
D.IN
ARC (HDMI OUT) input
AUX input
AUX
HDMI input
HDMI
BLUETOOTH mode
BT
TV SoundConnect
TV
USB mode
USB
The unit turns off automatically in the following situations.
● D.IN / HDMI / BT / TV / USB / ARC Mode
-
If there is no audio signal for 15 minutes.
● AUX Mode
To turn the Auto Power Down function ON or OFF, press and hold the & button for 5 seconds.
ON - AUTO POWER DOWN / OFF - AUTO POWER DOWN appears on the display.
-
If the AUX cable is disconnected for 15 minutes.
-
If there is no KEY input for 8 hours when the AUX cable is connected.
24
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 24
2015-04-16
3:55:13
FUNCTIONS
BLUETOOTH
TO CONNECT THE SOUNDBAR TO A BLUETOOTH DEVICE
ENG
You can connect a Bluetooth device to the Soundbar and enjoy music with high quality stereo sound, all without wires!
Check if the Bluetooth device supports the Bluetooth compliant stereo headset function.
Connect
Bluetooth device
(Source) button on the main unit’s top panel or the SOURCE button on the remote control to
1. Press the
select the BT mode.
•
You will see BT READY on the front display of the Soundbar.
2. Select the Bluetooth menu on the Bluetooth device you want to connect. (Refer to the Bluetooth device's user
manual.)
3. Select "[Samsung] HW-Jxxxx" from the list.
•
When the Soundbar is connected to the Bluetooth device, it will display [Bluetooth device name]  BT on
the front display.
•
The device name can only be displayed in English. An underline " _ " will be displayed if the name is not in
English.
•
If the Bluetooth device has failed to pair with the Soundbar, delete the previous "[Samsung] HW-Jxxxx"
found by the Bluetooth device and have it search for the Soundbar again.
4. Play music on the connected device.
•
You can listen to the music playing on the connected Bluetooth device over the Soundbar.
•
In BT mode, the Play / Pause / Next / Prev functions are not available. However, these functions are available
in Bluetooth devices supporting AVRCP.
●
●
●
●
If asked for PIN code when connecting a Bluetooth device, enter <0000>.
Only one Bluetooth device can be paired at a time.
The Bluetooth connection will be terminated when you turn the Soundbar off.
The Soundbar may not perform Bluetooth search or connection correctly under the following
circumstances:
- If there is a strong electrical field around the Soundbar.
- If several Bluetooth devices are simultaneously paired with the Soundbar.
- If the Bluetooth device is turned off, not in place, or malfunctions.
- Note that such devices as microwave ovens, wireless LAN adaptors, fluorescent lights, and gas stoves
use the same frequency range as the Bluetooth device, which can cause electric interference.
25
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 25
2015-04-16
3:55:13
FUNCTIONS
●
●
●
●
The Soundbar supports SBC data (44.1kHz, 48kHz).
Connect only to a Bluetooth device that supports the A2DP (AV) function.
You cannot connect the Soundbar to a Bluetooth device that supports only the HF (Hands Free) function.
Once you have paired the Soundbar to a Bluetooth device, selecting "[Samsung] HW-Jxxxx" from the
device's scanned devices list will automatically change the Soundbar to BT mode.
● Available only if the Soundbar is listed among the Bluetooth device’s paired devices. (The Bluetooth device
and the Soundbar must have been previously paired at least once.)
● Soundbar will appear in the Bluetooth device’s searched devices list only when the Soundbar is displaying
BT READY.
● In the TV SoundConnect mode, the Soundbar cannot be paired to another Bluetooth device.
TO DISCONNECT THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE FROM THE
SOUNDBAR
You can disconnect the Bluetooth device from the Soundbar. For instructions, see the Bluetooth device's user manual.
● The Soundbar will be disconnected.
● When the Soundbar is disconnected from the Bluetooth device, the Soundbar will display BT DISCONNECTED
on the front display.
TO DISCONNECT THE SOUNDBAR FROM THE BLUETOOTH
DEVICE
Press the SOURCE button on the remote control or the
from BT to another mode or turn off the Soundbar.
(Source) button on the product's top panel to switch
● The connected Bluetooth device will wait a certain amount of time for a response from the Soundbar before
terminating the connection. (Disconnection time may differ, depending on the Bluetooth device)
● In Bluetooth connection mode, the Bluetooth connection will be lost if the distance between the Soundbar
and the Bluetooth device exceeds 10 meters.
● The Soundbar automatically turns off after 15 minutes in the Ready state.
+ More About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a technology that enables Bluetooth-compliant devices to interconnect easily with each other using a
short wireless connection.
● A Bluetooth device may cause noise or malfunction, depending on usage, when:
- A part of your body is in contact with the receiving/transmitting system of the Bluetooth device or the
Soundbar.
- It is subject to electrical variation from obstructions caused by a wall, corner, or office partition.
- It is exposed to electrical interference from same frequency-band devices including medical equipment,
microwave ovens, and wireless LANs.
● Pair the Soundbar with the Bluetooth device while they are close together.
● The further the distance between the Soundbar and Bluetooth device, the worse the quality is.
If the distance exceeds the Bluetooth operational range, the connection is lost.
● In poor reception areas, the Bluetooth connection may not work properly.
● The Bluetooth connection only works when it is close to the unit. The connection will be automatically cut off if the
Bluetooth device is out of range. Even within range, the sound quality may be degraded by obstacles such as
walls or doors.
26
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 26
2015-04-16
3:55:14
FUNCTIONS
ENG
USING THE NETWORK STANDBY ON
FUNCTION
The Network Standby On function becomes available if wireless connection was properly established between the
smart device and Soundbar. This function turns on the Soundbar automatically when a smart device attempts to
connect to the Soundbar via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi. If the Soundbar was turned on via Bluetooth connection, its input
mode is set to BT automatically. Turning on the Soundbar via Wi-Fi is available only by using the App. For further
information, refer to the Web manual.
1. Connect the Smart device to your Soundbar.
2. Turn the Network Standby On function on by pressing the $ button on the Soundbar remote for more than 5
seconds. You can turn the function off by pressing the $ button again for more than 5 seconds.
● Available only if the Soundbar is listed among the Smart device’s paired devices. (The Smart device and the
Soundbar must have been previously paired at least once.)
● Soundbar will appear in the Smart device’s searched devices list only when the Soundbar is displaying [BT
READY] or [WiFi READY].
● In the TV SoundConnect mode, the Soundbar cannot be paired to another Smart device.
● If Network Standby On function did not work
- The Network Standby On is set to Off.
● Wi-Fi connection to the Soundbar will be terminated if its power cord was disconnected or the power was
cut off. Turn on the Soundbar and reconnect.
USING THE MULTIROOM LINK
Once the Soundbar is connected to a smart device with Multiroom App, you can connect multiple Samsung Multiroom
devices together wirelessly.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
+ Communication Basics
Smart Device:
Android or iOS
(App Control)
Internet
Wireless Router
1. Requirements: Wireless Router, Smart Device
2. The wireless router should be connected to the Internet.
3. The smart device should be connected to the router via a Wi-Fi connection.
27
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 27
2015-04-16
3:55:14
FUNCTIONS
INSTALLING THE SAMSUNG MULTIROOM APP
To use the Soundbar, you must download and then install the Samsung Multiroom App by accessing the app through
Google play or the App Store. With the Samsung Multiroom App installed, you can play music stored in your smart
device, from connected devices and other content providers, and from Internet radio stations.
+ Android or iOS
Download the Samsung Multiroom app from Google Play or the App Store of your smart device.
*
Market search : Samsung Multiroom
ANDROID APP ON
or
+ Accessing the Samsung Multiroom App
To access the Samsung Multiroom app, press the Multiroom app icon on your smart device.
CONNECTING THE SOUNDBAR TO YOUR NETWORK
On your Smart device, select the Samsung Multiroom app.
Follow the directions on your smart device’s screen.
● For further information, refer to the Web Manual.
- Web manual : www.Samsung.com  Support  Product name search  HW-J7501 PDF file
download.
● When connected to a wired network, try to use the CAT 7 cable to connect.
28
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 28
2015-04-16
3:55:15
FUNCTIONS
SOFTWARE UPDATE
AUX IN
LAN
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN
(TV-ARC)
ENG
DC 24V
Wi-Fi SETUP
SPK ADD
5V 0.5A
5V 0.5A
UPDATING WITH USB
Samsung may offer updates for the Soundbar's system firmware in the future.
If an update is offered, you can update the firmware by connecting a USB device with the firmware update stored on it
to the USB port on your Soundbar.
Note that if there are multiple update files, you must load them onto the USB device singly and use them to update the
firmware one file at a time.
Please visit samsung.com or contact the Samsung call centre to receive more information about downloading updates
files.
1. While the Soundbar is turned off, connect the USB storage device that contains the updating firmware to the
Soundbar’s USB port.
2. Disconnect the power cord, reconnect it and turn it on.
3. Turn on the Soundbar UPDATE appears on the display and updating begins within 3 minutes.
•
Upon completion of updating, the Soundbar turns off and on automatically.
+ If UPDATE was not displayed
1. Turn off the Soundbar, connect the USB storage device that contains update files to the Soundbar’s USB port.
2. Disconnect the power cord, reconnect it and turn it on.
● Insert a USB device containing the firmware update into the USB port on the main unit.
● Updating firmware may not work properly if audio files supported by the Soundbar are stored in the USB
storage device.
● Do not disconnect the power or remove the USB device while updates are being applied. The main unit will
turn off automatically after completing the firmware update.
29
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 29
2015-04-16
3:55:15
FUNCTIONS
● After the update, all settings are reset to their factory default settings. We recommend you write down your
settings so that you can easily reset them after the update. Note that updating firmware resets the
subwoofer connection too.
If connection to the subwoofer is not re-established automatically after the update, refer to page 17.
If the firmware fails to update, we recommend formatting the USB device in FAT16 and trying again.
● Do not format the USB device in the NTFS format. The Soundbar does not support the NTFS file system.
● Depending on the manufacturer, some USB devices may not be supported.
AUTO UPDATE
Even when the Soundbar is turned off, the Soundbar will automatically check latest software version and continue to
update if it was connected to the Internet.
● The Soundbar is configured to run auto update by default.
● To use auto update function, the Soundbar must be connected to the Internet.
● Wi-Fi connection to the Soundbar will be terminated if its power cord was disconnected or the power was
cut off. Turn on the Soundbar and reconnect.
30
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 30
2015-04-16
3:55:15
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
ENG
Before requesting service, please check the following.
The unit will not turn on.
 Connect the power plug to the outlet.
• Is the power cord plugged into the outlet?
A function does not work when the button is pressed.
 Disconnect the power plug and connect it again.
• Is there static electricity in the air?
Sound is not produced.
• Is the Mute function on?
 Press the
• Is the volume set to minimum?
 Adjust the Volume.
(Mute) button to cancel the function.
The remote control does not work.
• Are the batteries drained?
 Replace with new batteries.
• Is the distance between the remote control and main
unit too far?
 Move closer to the unit.
The TV SoundConnect (TV pairing) failed.
• Does your TV support TV SoundConnect?
 TV SoundConnect is supported by some Samsung
TVs released from 2012 on. Check your TV to see if it
supports TV SoundConnect.
• Is your TV firmware the latest version?
 Update your TV with the latest firmware.
• Does an error occur when connecting?
 Contact the Samsung call centre.
• Reset the TV mode and connect again.
 Press and hold the & button for 5 seconds to reset
the TV SoundConnect connection.
The red LED on the subwoofer blinks and the subwoofer is not producing sound.
 Try to connect your subwoofer again.
(See Page 17)
• Your subwoofer may not be connected to the
main body of the product.
The subwoofer drones and vibrates noticeably.
 Press the WOOFER button on your remote control to
adjust its value (between -12, -6 to +6).
• Try to adjust the vibration of your subwoofer.
31
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 31
2015-04-16
3:55:15
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
SPECIFICATIONS
Model name
HW-J7501
USB
Weight
GENERAL
AMPLIFIER
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
5V / 0.5A
Main Unit
4 kg
Subwoofer (PS-WJ7501)
7.8 kg
Main Unit
1230 x 47.5 x 170 mm
Subwoofer (PS-WJ7501)
500 x 332 x 161 mm
Operating Temperature Range
+5°C to +35°C
Operating Humidity Range
10 % to 75 %
Rated Output Main Unit
Power
Subwoofer (PS-WJ7501)
20W/CH x 8, 8ohm, THD=10%, 1KHz
160W, 3ohm, THD=10%, 100Hz
S/N Ratio (Analogue Input)
65 dB
Separation (1kHz)
65 dB
*
S/N ratio, distortion, separation, and usable sensitivity are based on measurements using AES (Audio Engineering
Society) guidelines.
*
Nominal specification
-
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd reserves the right to change the specifications without notice.
-
Weight and dimensions are approximate.
For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
a Open Source Licence Notice
-
To send inquiries and requests regarding open sources, contact Samsung via Email
(oss.request@samsung.com).
32
HW-J7501_UM_ENG_0416.indd 32
2015-04-16
3:55:15
‫‪HW-J7501‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫‪Curved Soundbar‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻛﺭﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/register‬‬
‫‪AH68-02820S-01‬‬
‫‪3:52:58‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪AH68-02820S-01‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 1‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻡ )‪(USB Host‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Curved Soundbar‬ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﻬﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺫﻱ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻔﺿﻝ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻭ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ )‪ (USB‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺷﻐﻼﺕ )‪ ،(MP3‬ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺿﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،(USB flash memory‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )‪Soundbar's USB‬‬
‫‪.(HOST‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ ﻋﻣ ًﻘﺎ ﻭﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ!‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺧﻳﺹ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ .TV Sound Connect‬ﻓﻌﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺗﺩﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻠﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﺑﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫‪ Dolby‬ﻭﺭﻣﺯ ‪ double-D‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪.Laboratories‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ‪ .Multiroom‬ﻳﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻲ ﻭﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ .Blu-ray‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺑﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ )‪ (DTS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ ‪.http://patents.dts.com‬‬
‫ﺻُﻧﻌﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ ،DTS .DTS Licensing Limited‬ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ DTS‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭ ‪DTS 2.0 Channel‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ .DTS‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪(Multiroom‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ARC‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪.ARC‬‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ )‪ (HDMI‬ﻭ )‪،(HDMI High-Definition Multimedia‬‬
‫ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ )‪ (HDMI‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫)‪ (HDMI Licensing LLC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪3:53:12‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 2‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻧﻣﺎ ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﺭﻙ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻫﻠﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ "ﺟﻬﺩ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺧﻁﻳﺭ" ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻁﺭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻸﻣﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺃﺣﻛﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ٍ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫• ﻻ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺎﺛﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﻣﻠﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﺂﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺳﺣﺏ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺳﻬﻼً ﻭﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪3:53:12‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 3‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫‪68.6 mm‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫‪99.1mm‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫‪99.1mm‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫‪99.1mm‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ )ﺃﺛﺎﺙ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻟﻪ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ۷‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺳﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟ ﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻋﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓ ﻝ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺻﻑ ﺍﻟ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻫﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟ ﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟ ﺎﺷ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ )ﺁﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﻭﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻓﺄﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻛﺎﺛﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺗﺎء‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺣﺭﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﻗﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻬﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫]ﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ[ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪/‬ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺑﺗﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪/‬ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺗﻘﺩ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺑﺗﻼﻋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺟﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺗﻣﺱ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪3:53:13‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 4‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪Network Standby On‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Multiroom Link‬‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ ۳۱‬ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫‪ ۱۱‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫‪ ۳۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪Soundbar‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺭ‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺭﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻛﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۱۷‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ )ﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ‪AUX‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪3:53:13‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 5‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺏ ﻋﺩ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ‬
‫)‪ 3‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‪(CR2032 :‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪: 1‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪: 2‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ 3 :‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪Taptite-‬‬
‫‪ 4 :‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ 4 :‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﻁ ﺭﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ 4 :‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫● ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪3:53:13‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫‪VOL. -/+‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ )ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ )ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪،TV ،BT ،HDMI ،AUX ،D.IN‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺩﺧﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻟﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻣﺛﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ٍ 3‬‬
‫)ﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ(‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ٍ 3‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻲ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻳﻌﺩ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،Soundbar‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪Audio Setup‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫‪3:53:17‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪OPTICAL IN (D.IN‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ( ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪HDMI OUT (TV-ARC‬‬
‫ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﻳﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫)ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪(USB‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺷﻐﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪) DC 24V‬ﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫‪3:53:20‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ : OFF - REPEAT‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : TRACK - REPEAT‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ALL - REPEAT‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : RANDOM - REPEAT‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،$‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ *) SOUND CONTROL‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ‪ $،#‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ TREBLE‬ﺃﻭ ‪ BASS‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .AUDIO SYNC‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ‪ $،#‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ -3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+3‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) SOUND CONTROL‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ٍ 5‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﺭﺩﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩﻳﺔ ‪ 150‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻭ‪ 300‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻭ‪ 600‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻭ‪ 1.2‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻭ‪ 2.5‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻭ‪ 5‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻭ‪ 10‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ‪ -6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+6‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻭﺑﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ SOUND CONTROL‬ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ $،#‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺄﺧﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ‪ ۰‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳۰۰‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،USB‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ TV‬ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BT‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪) Audio Sync‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪/ ON - ANYNET+ ،Auto Power Link OFF‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ OFF - POWER LINK‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(ON - POWER LINK / OFF - ANYNET+‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪ .Anynet+‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪Auto Power Link‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻙ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi SETUP‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ٍ 7‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻫﻭ ﻣﻠﻙ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫● ﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫‪3:53:21‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ & ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ & ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،#‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOUND EFFECT‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪) STANDARD -‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﻭ‪ MUSIC‬ﻭ‪ CLEAR VOICE‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ SPORTS‬ﻭ‪ MOVIE‬ﻭ‪ - NIGHT MODE‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ STANDARD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOUND‬‬
‫ﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪.OFF - SURROUND SOUND، ON - SURROUND SOUND‬‬
‫‪ SOUND‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‬
‫‪STREAMING MUSIC‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ STREAMING MUSIC‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ،STREAMING MUSIC‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪ soundbar‬ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۲۷‬‬
‫)‪* DRC (Dynamic Range Control‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺕ ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻭ‪ Dolby Digital Plus‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.Dolby TrueHD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،STREAMING MUSIC‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪DRC‬‬
‫)‪ (Dynamic Range Control‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ON‬ﻭ‪.OFF‬‬
‫‪ *) WOOFER‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ‪ $ ،#‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .WOOFER‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ‪ $ ،#‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪-6 ،-12‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+6‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ SPK ADD‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ soundbar‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WOOFER‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ٍ 5‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺭ ﱢﻛﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺑﺟﻬﺩ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺏ )‪ (+‬ﻣﺗﺟﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ '●' ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫‪3:53:22‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪SOUNDBAR‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ SOUNDBAR‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ Samsung‬ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻲ ‪ 65/55 – S9000/S8500‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻭ‪ 65 – S9500‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ‪ ،JS9500‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ‪ 1.6‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻛﻼً ﻣﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺗﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺷﺭﺍﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺭﻑ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟـ ‪،S9500‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪ 65‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ 4 : 1‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ 10 : 2‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ )‪ 2‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ( ﻣﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫‪3:53:23‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Soundbar‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺳﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺭﻑ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪ S9500 65‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪) .٥‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑـ ‪ ،S۹٥۰۰‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪ ٦٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺧﻁﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺭﻑ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ ٤) ۲‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺭﻑ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺫﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻌﻪ ﻏﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫‪3:53:25‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 12‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪ S9500 65‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ .۷‬ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟـ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۸‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪Soundbar‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑـ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫‪ .۹‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻁﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱۰‬ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺭﻑ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑـ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫‪3:53:29‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 13‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ SOUNDBAR‬ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ 3 :‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ 3 : 2‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪Wi Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺛﺑﺕ ﺳﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ )‪ ۳‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ( ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ ۳) 2‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ( ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ )‪ 2‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ( ﻣﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫‪3:53:31‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﻛﻪ ﻋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ SOUNDBAR‬ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺭ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫‪3:53:33‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻣﺭّﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺭﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪WE‬‬
‫‪PO‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺿﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺭﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟـ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪ ٤) Taptite-‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟـ ﺭﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻁﺎﻁ ﺭﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ )‪ ٤‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ( ﻟﻺﻛﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫‪3:53:34‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻳﺩﻭ ًﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ )ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ( ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ Link‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺿﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪POWER‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ID SET‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺩﺑﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ٍ ٥‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﻳﻧﻁﻔﺊ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪) STANDBY‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ( ﻭﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪) LINK‬ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء( ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،(STANDBY‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺧﻣﺱ ٍ‬
‫)ﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ID SET‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻹﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ( ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ )ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺿﻳﺋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﻓﺷﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۰‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫‪3:53:34‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻁﻔﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪) STANDBY LED‬ﻟﻣﺑﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁ )ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء( ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪ ۲٫٤) Soundbar‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ( ﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺻﻠﺏ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥-۱‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ )‪ HDMI OUT (TV-ARC‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.D.IN‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺩ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ ARC‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪.(ARC) HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺟﻭﻑ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺻﻣﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 14‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻻ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪.ARC‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫‪3:53:35‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 18‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ )ﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‬
‫‪OPTICAL OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪) OPTICAL IN‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ‪ OPTICAL OUT‬ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.D.IN‬‬
‫_ ‪Auto Power Link‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUTO POWER LINK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ON - ANYNET+ / OFF - POWER LINK‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪OFF - ANYNET+ / ON - POWER LINK‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ‪) .‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.D.IN‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪.Auto power Link‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫‪3:53:37‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 19‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫‪TV SOUNDCONNECT‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪.TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ "ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ"‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ "ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ" ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ"‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.TV‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺳﺅﺍﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ >ﻧﻌﻡ< ﻹﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺳﻳﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪.TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ & ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )‪ TV SoundConnect (SoundShare‬ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍ ًء ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ .2012‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )‪ TV SoundConnect (SoundShare‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‪) .‬ﻟﻠﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،2014‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.SoundShare‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻘﻁﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﺑﺣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪.TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺗﺭ‬‫‪ -‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ" ﻭ"ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ" ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫‪3:53:38‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺩ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻐﻼﺕ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻣﺷﻐﻼﺕ ‪ ،Blu-ray‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪ ،set top boxes‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ‪AUX‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﻭﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﻙ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫)ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‬
‫‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫‪AUX OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL OUT‬‬
‫‪ /BD‬ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ‪/DVD‬‬
‫‪/Set-top box‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫‪3:53:38‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 21‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫_ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪AUX‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪) AUX IN‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ‪ AUDIO OUT‬ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.AUX‬‬
‫_ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪) OPTICAL IN‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ‪ OPTICAL OUT‬ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.D.IN‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )‪ (Auto Power Off‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ۱۰ USB‬ﺃﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫● ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ‪.USB‬‬
‫● ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ ‪ FAT32‬ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ NTFS‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﺧﻼ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﺎﺩﻑ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫‪3:53:40‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 22‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺭﻭﺗﻭﻛﻭﻻﺕ ‪ PTP‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ )ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻲ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ‪ (WMA‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪DRM‬‬
‫● ﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ )‪ (HDDs‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫*‪mp3.‬‬
‫*‪wma.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺕ‬
‫‪MPEG 1 Layer1‬‬
‫‪48/44.1/32‬‬
‫‪ 448 ~ 32‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪MPEG 1 Layer2‬‬
‫‪48/44.1/32‬‬
‫‪ 384 ~ 32‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪MPEG 1 Layer3‬‬
‫‪48/44.1/32‬‬
‫‪ 320 ~ 32‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪MPEG 2 Layer3‬‬
‫‪48/44.1/32/24/22.05/16‬‬
‫‪ 160 ~ 8‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪MPEG 2.5 Layer3‬‬
‫‪48/44.1/32/24/22.05/16/12/11.025/8‬‬
‫‪ 160 ~ 8‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪Wave_Format_MSAudio1‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪Wave_Format_MSAudio2‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪WMA Professional‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫*‪wav.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪192KHz ~ 8KHz‬‬
‫~ ‪ 8.8‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪ogg.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪48KHz ~ 8KHz‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫*‪flac.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪192KHz ~ 8KHz‬‬
‫~ ‪ 5.6‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪m4a.‬‬
‫‪Alac‬‬
‫)‪(Apple lossless Audo codec‬‬
‫‪192KHz ~ 8KHz‬‬
‫~ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪aif.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﺩﻟﻲ‬
‫‪192KHz ~ 8KHz‬‬
‫~ ‪ 4.4‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﺛﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫‪3:53:41‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 23‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ (HDMI OUT) ARC‬ﻣﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪D.IN‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪AUX‬‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪BT‬‬
‫‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ARC/USB/TV/BT/HDMI/D.IN‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AUX‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Auto Power Down‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ‪ ON‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،OFF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ & ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ٍ ٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ OFF - AUTO POWER DOWN / ON - AUTO POWER DOWN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ AUX‬ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪.AUX‬‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫‪3:53:41‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 24‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ SOUNDBAR‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺑﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ!‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.BT‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺭﻯ ‪ BT READY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ "‪ "[Samsung] HW-Jxxxx‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻌﺭﺽ ]ﺍﺳﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ[ ‪ BT ‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ " _ " ﻭﺗﺣﺗﻪ ﺧﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Soundbar‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﺫﻑ "‪ "[Samsung] HW-Jxxxx‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،BT‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫)‪.(AVRCP‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ >‪.<0000‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻗﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳُﺟﺭﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻗﻭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.Soundbar‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻗﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪ ،‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻋﻁﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫‪3:53:42‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 25‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ٤٤٫۱) SBC‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ ٤۸ ،‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪) A2DP‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪.(Hands Free) HF‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻗﺭﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ "‪ "[Samsung] HW-Jxxxx‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻓﺣﺻﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪. BT‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪) .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻟﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪.BT READY‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،TV SoundConnect‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪SOUNDBAR‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ .Soundbar‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ BT DISCONNECTED‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ SOUNDBAR‬ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ BT‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﺟﻳﺏ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ(‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻧﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺧﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪) Ready‬ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻫﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫_ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﻝ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻁﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺟﺳﺩﻙ ﻣﻼﻣﺳًﺎ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻣﻛﺗﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺻﻼﺕ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻗﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻧﺎﻥ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺑﺿﻌﻑ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺧﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫‪3:53:42‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 26‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪NETWORK STANDBY ON‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Network Standby On‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﻳﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻭ‪ .Soundbar‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BT‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑـ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Network Standby On‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ $‬ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ٍ ٥‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ $‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ٍ ٥‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺩﺭﺟً ﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫]‪ [BT READY‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[WiFi READY‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،TV SoundConnect‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Network Standby On‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ Network Standby On‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑـ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪MULTIROOM LINK‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ‪ ،Multiroom App‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫_ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Android‬ﺃﻭ ‪iOS‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ(‬
‫ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫‪3:53:42‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 27‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪SAMSUNG MULTIROOM‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،Soundbar‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ Google play‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ .App Store‬ﻭﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ ،Samsung Multiroom‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻓﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫_ ‪ Android‬ﺃﻭ ‪iOS‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Google play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ App Store‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﻕ‪Samsung Multiroom :‬‬
‫‪ANDROID APP ON‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫_ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪Samsung Multiroom‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ ،Samsung Multiroom‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Multiroom‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪ SOUNDBAR‬ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪.Samsung Multiroom‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ‪  Support  www.Samsung.com :‬ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪ ‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪.HW-J7501‬‬‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ CAT 7‬ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫‪3:53:43‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 28‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪HDMI OUT OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫)‪(TV-ARC‬‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫‪5V 0.5A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑـ ‪.Soundbar‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﻣﻔﺭﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ‪ Samsung.com‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪.Soundbar USB‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Soundbar UPDATE‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪UPDATE‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Soundbar‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ‪.USB‬‬
‫● ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫‪3:53:43‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 29‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻳﻌﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪.۱۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺷﻠﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻧﺎ ﻧﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ‪ .NTFS‬ﻻ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.NTFS‬‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،Soundbar‬ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ ﻭﻳﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑـ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫‪3:53:43‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 30‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ARA‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻝ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺷﺣﻧﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻝ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻛﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻝ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺷﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺟ ًّﺩﺍ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ‪) TV SoundConnect‬ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪TV SoundConnect‬؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺭﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ .2012‬ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻧﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪.TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫• ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻧﻙ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻧﻙ ﺑﺄﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻣﻼء ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ TV‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ & ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫‪.TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ‪(۱۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻳُﺻﺩﺭ ﻁﻧﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﻭﻳﻬﺗﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ WOOFER‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ )ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ -6 ،-12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+6‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫‪3:53:44‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫‪HW-J7501‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‪ 0.5 /‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻛﺟﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪(PS-WJ7501‬‬
‫‪ 7.8‬ﻛﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 170 × 47.5 × 1230‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻕ( ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪(PS-WJ7501‬‬
‫‪ 161 × 332 × 500‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ +5‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +35‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 10%‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪75%‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪ 8 ،8 x‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ )‪ 1 ،10% = (THD‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪(PS-WJ7501‬‬
‫‪ 160‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪ 3 ،‬ﺃﻭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ )‪ 100 ،10% = (THD‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺿﺟﻳﺞ )ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪ 65‬ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ )‪ 1‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫‪ 65‬ﺩﻳﺳﻳﺑﻝ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺿﺟﻳﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ‪) AES‬ﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺳﺎﻣﺳﻭﻧﺞ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ‬
‫ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻔﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬‫)‪.(oss.request@samsung.com‬‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫‪3:53:44‬‬
‫‪2015-04-16‬‬
‫‪HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 32‬‬
© 2015 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care
centre.
.‫ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳊﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬.Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd ‫ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬2015 ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬
SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑـ‬
.SAMSUNG ‫ ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻼﺀ‬،Samsung ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﲟﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬
Web Site
www.samsung.com/support
www.samsung.com/africa_en/support
www.samsung.com/africa_fr/support
www.samsung.com/support
HW-J7501_UM_ARA_0416.indd 33
 Contact Centre
Area
Africa `
SOUTH AFRICA
BOTSWANA
NAMIBIA
ZAMBIA
MAURITIUS
REUNION
MOZAMBIQUE
NIGERIA
0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864)
8007260000
08 197 267 864
0211 350370
23052574020
262508869
847267864 / 827267864
0800-726-7864
0800-10077
GHANA
0302-200077
8000 0077 COTE D’IVOIRE
800-00-0077
SENEGAL
7095-0077
CAMEROON
0800 545 545
KENYA
0800 300 300
UGANDA
0800 755 755 /
TANZANIA
0685 889 900
9999
RWANDA
200
BURUNDI
499999
DRC
1969
SUDAN
Web Site
 Contact Centre
Area
Middle East `
www.samsung.com/eg/support
www.samsung.com/n_africa/support
www.samsung.com/iran/support
www.samsung.com/sa/support
www.samsung.com/sa_en/support
(English)
www.samsung.com/pk/support
www.samsung.com/n_africa/support
www.samsung.com/ae/support
(English)
www.samsung.com/ae_ar/support
(Arabic)
www.samsung.com/tr/support
www.samsung.com/Levant/support
(English)
www.samsung.com/n_africa/support
08000-7267864
16580
021 36 11 00
021-8255
EGYPT
ALGERIA
IRAN
8002474357 SAUDI ARABIA
0800-Samsung (72678)
80-1000-12
800-SAMSUNG
(800 - 726 7864)
800-SAMSUNG
(800 - 726 7864)
183-CALL (183-2255)
8000-GSAM (8000-4726)
800-CALL (800-2255)
444 77 11
0800-22273
06 5777444
18252273
080 100 22 55
PAKISTAN
TUNISIA
U.A.E
OMAN
KUWAIT
BAHRAIN
QATAR
TURKEY
JORDAN
SYRIA
MOROCCO
2015-04-16
3:53:44
Download PDF

advertising